JP7263139B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state more advantageous than the first advantageous state.

Conventionally, as a game state after a jackpot game state (advantageous state), it is controlled to a high-probability high base state (special state) in which the frequency of variable display is increased during a period until a predetermined variable display is executed. In some gaming machines, when a variable display for a big hit is performed in the high probability/high base state, a variable display with a short variable display period is performed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-168136 A

However, in Patent Literature 1, since big wins can occur consecutively within a short period of time, it is conceivable that the gambling nature becomes excessively high. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute a variable display with a long variable display period in the special state so that the big wins do not occur consecutively within a short period of time. Also, there is a problem that the game is delayed.

The present invention has been made with a focus on such problems, and while preventing the advantageous state from occurring continuously in a short period of time, the increase in dissatisfaction caused by the lengthening of the variable display period and the dullness of the variable display period. To provide a game machine capable of preventing

The gaming machine described in means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and is controllable to a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The variable display is performed in a period including at least a first period from the end of the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times and a second period after the variable display is performed the predetermined number of times. a game state control means capable of controlling a special state with a higher frequency than the normal state;
When executing variable display, one variable display period is determined from among a plurality of different variable display periods including a first variable display period and a second variable display period longer than the first variable display period. variable display period determining means for
Execution of notification effect capable of executing notification effect for notifying control to at least the second advantageous state at a plurality of different timings including a first timing during variable display and a second timing after the first timing. means and
with
The notification effect executing means is configured so that the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is higher when executed during the first period than during the second period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the first timing at a rate, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a higher rate than when it is executed in one period,
The variable display period determining means determines that when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the first period, the display is executed during the second period. When the second variable display period can be determined at a high rate and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, the first determining the first variable display period at a higher rate than when running in period;
The notification effect executing means can execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period when the variable display in the second variable display period is executed in the first period.
It is characterized by
The gaming machine described in means 1 is
Variable display is performed, and includes a first advantageous state (for example, big win game state of big win A) advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state (for example, big win game state of big win B) more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, big win game state). A plurality of controllable to a plurality of advantageous states, including disadvantageous set values (eg 1 to 3) and advantageous set values (eg 4 to 6) which are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set one of the setting values,
A first period from the end of the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a period until the variable display is performed 50 times), and after the variable display is performed the predetermined number of times In a period including at least a second period (for example, a period in which the 51st to 100th or 51st to 150th variable display is performed), the frequency in which the variable display is performed is a special state (for example, a high game state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing) and
When executing variable display, the first variable display period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6) and the first variable A second variable display period that is longer than the display period (for example, 180 seconds, which is the special fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8-6) From among a plurality of different variable display periods Variable display period determination means for determining the variable display period of 1 (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17);
A notification effect that notifies that the control is at least in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that moves the body 179SG300) is the first timing during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the timing in 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach) A second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), a timing within 23 seconds or 33 seconds from reaching reach during variable display to ending variable display ), a notification effect execution means that can be executed at a plurality of different timings (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
The notification effect executing means has a higher rate of variable display executed based on the second advantageous state being executed during the first period than during the second period. The notification effect can be executed at the first timing, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C), the 1st to 50th variable When the variable display result is the big hit B in the display, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing, and when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. , the part where the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the second timing),
The variable display period determination means is such that the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is higher when executed during the first period than during the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period when the variable display is executed in the second period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is running (eg, the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17). When the variable display result is the big hit B, the variable pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and the variation pattern is variable in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. When the display result is a big hit B, the part that always determines the fluctuation pattern to be any one of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table A),
moreover,
Determining means (for example, CPU103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5) and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed to the advantageous state is included in a mode including a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). Suggestive effect execution means that can be executed in a mode that does not exist (for example, a portion that executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18);
A special effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) that is different from the specific effect and suggests being controlled to the advantageous state executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7);
with
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, big win A or big win B big win gaming state) and a second advantageous state (for example, big win C big winning gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. including
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the disadvantage setting value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. 9 -21 (B), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3. non-executable part in
When the advantageous set value is set and the decision means has not decided to control the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 9 -21 (C) ~ Figure 9-21 (E), as shown in Figure 9-21 (E), if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and if the variable display result is wrong, The part where the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-4 , the variable display result always becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big win game state of big win C),
When the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-21 and 9- As shown in 22, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big win, the portion is controlled to one of the big win A, big win B, and big win C. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from occurring consecutively in a short period of time, and to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to an increase in the variable display period. Further, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and since there are cases where the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and the second advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous set value is set. A suggestive performance including a specific performance is executed when the game is being played, and the decline in game interest can be reduced when control is not performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The notification effect executing means can execute a special notification effect that is not executed during the second period when the variable display of the second variable display period is executed during the first period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can Part that can execute all rotation reach production as special reach production by executing special reach production pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 8-35)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect using a mode corresponding to the second advantageous state in the special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45, the image display device 5 The part that displays the rainbow effect image 179SG005M in
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand that the player is in the second advantageous state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 2 or 3,
The notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect in a plurality of patterns including a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, FIGS. 8-35 and 8- As shown in 36, the part where the special reach effect can be executed by any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ),
The special notification effect is further provided with restricting means for limiting repeated execution in the same pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect pattern of the special reach effect was The part that is determined from the excluded production patterns)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the repeated execution of the special notification effect in the same pattern.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The notification effect executing means executes the variable display based on the control to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the first timing at a higher rate than when the variable display is executed in the first period (for example, variable display in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state When the result is a big hit A, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, and the variable display result is a big hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, as shown in FIG. A portion in which the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period until the ready-to-win state is reached, and that the variable display result is a big win (jackpot B)),
The variable display period determination means is configured to control to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. The second variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when the variable display performed is performed in the first period (eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17). When the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and the high base. If the variable display result is a jackpot A in the variable display after the 1st to 50th times of the state, by selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is always normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β. part determined by the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period, the variable display in the second variable display period having a longer period is easily executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the gambling property due to a shortened interval in which the advantageous state is obtained, and the notification effect is easily executed at the early first timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the delay caused by the execution of the variable display.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
A special state entry effect (for example, a first high-base state entry effect or a second high-base state entry effect as an ending effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state ends can be executed. Special state rush production execution means (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes the ending production process shown in FIG. 8-38),
When the advantageous state is controlled, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state is the second advantageous state before the advantageous state ends (for example, a jackpot game as shown in FIG. 8-44 (B) Advantageous state type notification means (for example, a part for notifying that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot (jackpot B) in the 8th round) (for example, a portion for the production control CPU 120 to execute a jackpot middle production process);
further comprising
The game state control means, as the special state, the first special state (for example, a high probability high base that executes time-saving control over 100 variable displays and definite variable control over 150 variable displays state) and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state (for example, a high-accuracy high base state that performs time-saving control and probability-variable control over 150 variable displays), When the first advantageous state ends, control to the first special state, and when the second advantageous state ends, control to the second special state (for example, in the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 8-19 by the CPU 103 , If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variable number counter is set to "150" and the time saving counter is set to "100", and if the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter are set. The part that sets "150"),
The special state entry effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a first special state entry effect (for example, a first high base state entry effect as an ending effect) for informing that the first special state will be controlled when the first advantageous state ends, and A second special state rushing effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies that the second special state is controlled when the second advantageous state ends, and has a longer effect period than the first special state rushing effect. as a second high base state rush effect) can be executed,
As the second special state entry effect, after starting the effect in the same manner as the first special state entry effect, a switching effect (for example, FIG. 8-39 As shown in (B), after executing the first high base state entry effect, the movable body 179SG300 operates as part of the second high base state rush effect, thereby controlling the high base state with a variable number of display times. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a part in which a certain “100 times” display is updated to “150 times” display).
According to this feature, when the advantageous second advantageous state ends, the second special state rush effect having a long effect period at the time of termination is executed, so that the interval between the advantageous states is shortened and the gambling property is excessively increased. You can prevent it from getting too high.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 7 to 11 below. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There was one that could execute an effect (specific effect) that suggests whether a value has been set. In such a game machine, the variable display result did not become a big hit (the variable display result was not controlled to an advantageous state) because the specific effect was executed and the variable display result was lost (not controlled to an advantageous state). ) Instead, it is conceivable to notify that the set value set in the game machine is a set value (advantageous set value) advantageous to the player, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a special effect informing that the result of the variable display is a big hit during the variable display. There is a problem that it is difficult to draw the player's attention to both the and the specific performance, and the interest in the game is lowered.

The game machine of means 7 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous set value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set value (for example, , 4 to 6), a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can set one of a plurality of setting values including
Determining means (for example, CPU103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 5) and,
Based on the determination result of the determining means, a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed to the advantageous state is included in a mode including a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). Suggestive effect execution means that can be executed in a mode that does not exist (for example, a portion that executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18);
A special effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) that is different from the specific effect and suggests being controlled to the advantageous state executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7);
with
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, big win A or big win B big win gaming state) and a second advantageous state (for example, big win C big winning gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. including
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the disadvantage setting value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. 9 -21 (B), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3. non-executable part in
When the advantageous set value is set and the decision means has not decided to control the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 9 -21 (C) ~ Figure 9-21 (E), as shown in Figure 9-21 (E), if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and if the variable display result is wrong, The part where the cut-in effect can be executed with pattern CI-3),
When the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-4 , the variable display result always becomes a big hit and is controlled to the big win game state of big win C),
When the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-21 and 9- As shown in 22, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big win, the portion is controlled to one of the big win A, big win B, and big win C. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and there is a case where the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and the control is performed to the second advantageous state, which is advantageous. It is possible to reduce the decrease in game interest when a suggestive performance including a specific performance is executed when a set value is set and control is not performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 7,
When the suggestive effect is executed, a special pattern in which control to the advantageous state is notified after it is once suggested not to be controlled to the advantageous state (Super Reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5)),
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect including the specific effect is higher than the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect of the mode not including the specific effect. Low (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) to 9-21 (E), when performing variable display in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the resurrection effect is executed Part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with pattern CI-3 is set lower than when executing variable display with the variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that does not occur)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and it is suggested that the advantageous state is not controlled, the special pattern is executed even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the recognition being erroneous.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to means 7 or 8,
A special effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect of pattern YE-4) that informs that the control is performed in the advantageous state, which is different from the specific effect After executing the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-25, the part for executing the effect process during variable display shown in FIG.
The special effect executing means restricts the execution of the special effect when the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 9-26 (A) As shown in , the variable display result is a big hit, and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high degree of expectation for a big win, the advance notice effect is executed. If so, the part that determines the production pattern from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 with high expectations for big hits)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the special effect is executed in advance when the specific effect is executed, thereby controlling the advantageous state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is played, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 9,
A first predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) and a predetermined effect (for example, an advance notice effect) that are different from the specific effect and suggest that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state. Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a second predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-3) that suggests that the control to the advantageous state is performed at a higher rate than the first predetermined effect 9-25 for executing the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG.
When the predetermined effect execution means is set to the advantageous set value and the determination means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is executed in a mode including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26, any one of 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 as a set value, cut When execution of pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high expectation of big hit, is decided, pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 with high expectation of big win are excluded when the advance notice performance is executed. The production pattern is determined from the production pattern (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's expectation for being controlled to be in an advantageous state by executing the specific performance and the second predetermined performance is not excessively heightened even though the control is not to be in an advantageous state. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 10,
As a game state different from the advantageous state, a first game state (eg, low-probability-low base state and low-probability-high base state) and a second game state (for example, High probability high base state) and controllable game control means (for example, the part where CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect in the first game state and the second game state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-13 and 9-14, the CPU 103 is in the game state Regardless of super reach fluctuation pattern selectable part),
When the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed in the second game state. is higher than the ratio at which the suggestive effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed in the first game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21, the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 If the value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is a super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the set value is the same value, cut-in production in a high probability high base state is set higher than the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the low probability low base state and the low probability high base state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second game state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect that is not controlled to the advantageous state indicating that the advantageous set value is set is more likely to be executed than in the first game state. Interest in the second game state can be improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table B, and (C) is an explanation showing a small win variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows a receiving command buffer at the time of dynamic winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect patterns of the big hit suggestive effects and setting suggestive effects to be executed as the suggestive effects during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during variable front display in the case, and (C) is a diagram showing effect patterns of character effects and timer effects executed as suggestive effects during variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing high-base middle variable display suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows special reach production|presentation pattern determination processing. It is the figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a special ready-to-win production, and the figure which shows the content of the production|presentation of each production|presentation pattern. (A) is a timing chart in the case of executing a variable display in the high base state with the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β to achieve a big hit, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ in the high base state. (C) is a diagram showing the ratio of the timing at which the variable probability big hit B is announced in the variable display in the high base state. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. (A) is a timing chart of the ending effect at the end of the big win game of the variable probability big win A, and (B) is a timing chart of the ending effect at the end of the big win game of the variable probability big win B. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the big-hit game of the big-hit A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the big-hit game of the big-hit B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in variable display of super reach in a high base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in variable display of super reach in a high base state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big-hit variation pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small-hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; 9 is a flowchart showing cut-in effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a cut-in effect pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios in pattern CI-3 of the cut-in effect; 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; They are an explanatory diagram showing an execution ratio of the advance notice effect and a determination ratio of the effect pattern, and an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a period during which an advance notice effect can be executed for each variation pattern; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of an advance notice effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect during variable display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a notification mode of a variable display result for each variation pattern; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-1; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of cut-in effects and the determination ratio of effect patterns in modification 208SG-2; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-3; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing execution determination ratios of the announcement effect and effect pattern determination ratios in Modified Example 208SG-4. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-5; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution determination ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in Modified Example 208SG-6; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a set value suggesting effect executable period and a set value suggesting effect execution determination ratio in modification 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one having an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big hit combination ("no reach"). ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 179SG)
Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 179SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-46.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 179SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 179SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 179SG003, a glass door frame 179SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 179SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 179SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 179SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 179SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 179SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 179SG002R is the left game area 179SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 179SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 179SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 179SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 179SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 179SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 179SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 179SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 179SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 179SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

A movable body 179SG300 is provided above the image display device 5 . The movable body 170SG300 is driven by a movable body motor 179SG301 (see FIG. 8-2) connected to the effect control board 12 to drive the standby position shown in FIG. ) (see Figure 8-44).

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 179SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 179SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 179SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 179SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 179SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting-switching switch 179SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 179SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting-switching switch 179SG052 are housed in the substrate case 179SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 179SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 179SG201.

Since the substrate case 179SG201 having the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting changeover switch 179SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 179SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 179SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 179SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 179SG051 is also a switch that can perform switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 179SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the board case 179SG201. The display monitor 179SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case 179SG201. That is, the display monitor 179SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 179SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 179SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 179SG003 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the second 1st special symbol display device 179SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 179SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 179SG025A, a second pending display device 179SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 179SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 179SG025C capable of displaying the normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 179SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) and jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 179SG002R. A game information display unit 179SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 179SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 179SG133 that lights up when it is in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 179SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 179SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big hit type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result is a big win in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 179SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 179SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension indicator 179SG025A and the second suspension indicator 179SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 179SG025A and second pending display 179SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 179SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 179SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 179SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A variable display based on memory is performed.

Also, the round indicator 179SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 179SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 179SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fifth variable display result specifying command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 179SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is performed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is performed. be. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach fluctuation patterns, four or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 179SG, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation pattern of super reach γ is provided only when the variable display result is a big hit, and the special figure variation time is set to be the longest. there is

It should be noted that, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of the fluctuation pattern is first determined. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation contents (effect contents) are determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous performance three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 179SG004A or the second special symbol display device 179SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot B based on a hit type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A and a jackpot B are set in which the time saving control and the high accuracy control are executed after the jackpot game state is ended and the high accuracy base state is shifted to. there is In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, a form is exemplified in which a big win A and a big win B (probability variable big win) drinking are set as the big win types, in which high accuracy control is always executed after the end of the big win game. is not limited to this, and as the jackpot type, a jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) in which high-precision control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game may be set.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 7 rounds (so-called 7 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. B" is a normal open big win in which 16 rounds (so-called 16 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' is that the special game is executed 100 times or the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed 100 times. end by The time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot B'' is that the special game is executed 150 times or the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed 150 times. end by

In addition, the variable probability control executed after the end of the big win game state by "big win A" and the variable probability control executed after the end of the big win game state by "big win B" are executed 150 times of the special game. Alternatively, the game ends when a jackpot game state is reached before the 150th special game is executed.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG, the game state is first controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the big-hit game state by the "big-hit A". Then, when the variable display result does not result in a big hit during the 100 times of special figure games (100 times of variable display) in the high probability/high base state, the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state. In addition, when the variable display result does not become a big hit during 50 times of special figure games (50 times of variable display) in the low probability/high base state, the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state. On the other hand, after the jackpot game state by the "jackpot B" is finished, the game state is first controlled to the high-probability-high base state. Then, when the variable display result does not result in a big hit during 150 times of special figure games (150 times of variable display) in the high-probability-high base state, the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 199 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. , and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (game When the winning hole where the ball wins is the second starting winning hole, the ratio of determining the big win B as the big win type is set higher than when the winning hole where the game ball wins is the first starting winning hole. On the other hand, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table includes 1 to 50 special games in a high base state (up to 50 times in a high base state). Variation pattern determination table A for jackpot used except when the jackpot type is jackpot B in variable display), and 1 to 50 special game in high base state (variable display up to 50 times in high base state) A big hit variation pattern determination table B used when the big win type is the big win B is provided in advance, and these big hit variation pattern determination tables include normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1-1), Variation pattern judgment for each variation pattern of Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), Super Reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1-1) 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). .

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4 ). That is, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special game variation time is always the longest. It is set so that the variable display is executed in the long super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PB1-4).

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special game variation time is always the longest. Although a form in which variable display is executed in a long super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a high base state 1 to 50 times of special display is shown. Even if the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the game shown in the figure (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the normal reach variation pattern (PB1 -1), variation pattern of super reach α (PB1-2), and variation pattern of super reach β (PB1-3). Furthermore, even if the jackpot type is a jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the variation pattern of super reach γ (PB1-4 ) to execute variable display.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 or more are provided as a small hit variation pattern. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium) for deviation, 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are fluctuations of non-reach deviation It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the characteristic portion 179SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 179SG029 has a first display section 179SG029A, a second display section 179SG029B, a third display section 179SG029C, and a fourth display section 179SG029D. Each of the first display portion 179SG029A to the fifth display portion 179SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 179SG029A to fifth display section 179SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 179SG029 in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 179SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 179SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 179SG029, the first display section 179SG029A displays "b" and the second display section 179SG029B displays "L." ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. When displaying base 2 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 179SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D.

In the display monitor 179SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 179SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 179SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 179SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 179SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 179SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 179SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 179SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 179SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 179SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 179SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing section 179SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A as shown in FIG. In the startup winning command buffer 179SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 8-21) described later is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, when the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 179SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 179SG005U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 179SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 179SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (179SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (179SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (179SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (179SGSa004; N), proceed to 179SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (179SGSa003; Y, 179SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (179SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; N), proceed to 179SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (179SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (179SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described below has been executed If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (179SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (179SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (179SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 179SGSa011 (179SGSa010). move on.

At 179SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011). If the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa012). When the open sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 179SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened (179SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (179SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (179SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 179SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (179SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (179SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 179SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 179SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, when the lock switch 179SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is specified by specifying the set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (179SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, when the lock switch 179SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 179SG029 may be terminated.

If the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF at 179SGSa011 (179SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (179SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d without executing the processes of 179SGSa013a to 179SGSa013c.

In 179SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started (RAM clear processing (179SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 179SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 179SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) without executing, go to 179SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (179SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGSa001 to 179SGSa013e and 179SGSa017 to 179SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 179SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa014; Y), proceed to 179SGSa022; (179SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 179SGSa028. (179SGSa016).

In addition, at 179SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (179SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (179SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa019).

When the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened, the lock switch 179SG051 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (179SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (179SGSa021). Then, the processes 179SGSa009 to 179SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (179SGSa017; N), the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF (179SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 179SG090 is OFF (179SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (179SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 (179SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029. (179SGSa024).

After executing 179SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (179SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (179SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (179SGSa026; N), the processing of 179SGSa025 and 179SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (179SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 179SG029 stops blinking (179SGSa027) and proceeds to 179SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 179SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 179SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (179SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (179SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (179SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 179SGSa031, the CPU 103 stores an abnormal set value in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), based on the recovery from the power interruption during setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12 Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (179SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (179SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (179SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (179SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (179SGSa034; N), the processing of 179SGSa033 and 179SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (179SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 179SG029A, the second display 179SG029B, the third display 179SG029C, and the fourth display 179SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 179SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (179SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B (179SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa032 (179SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 179SGSa032 to 179SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 179SG029. , the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 179SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the staff at the game parlor can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power interruption during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (179SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 179SGSa008 (179SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 179SGSa014 (179SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (179SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (179SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (179SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 179SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (179SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting mouth buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (179SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 179SGS101 (179SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 179SGS102 (179SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (179SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (179SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (179SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 179SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (179SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (179SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 179SGS103 and 179SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (179SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (179SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 179SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data representing a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (179SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (179SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 179SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 179SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (179SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the processing of 179SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (179SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (179SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 179SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (179SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 179SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (179SGS115), and then the processing of 179SGS104 is performed. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 179SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 179SGS 112 in FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 179SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit not shown, for example. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (179SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 179SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (179SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7(A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, with reference to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 179SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the jackpot determination range (179SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When 179SGS123 determines that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot does not occur during variable display (179SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 179SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (179SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that the 179SGS124 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur at the time of the variable display (179SGS124; N), the variable display result is "missing". (179SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (179SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (179SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (179SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (179SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The judgment table D is selected and set (179SGS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is a variation pattern determination table for loss used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D). be.

Incidentally, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these deviation variation pattern determination table A and deviation variation pattern determination table D, deviations that are used when the total number of pending memories are 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 179SGS137, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, it is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when 179SGS123 is determined to be within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (179SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (179SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 179SGS130 is executed (179SG131), whether or not the time saving flag is set, and whether the suspension storage is the suspension storage of the second special figure (179SGS132, 179SGS133). It should be noted that whether or not the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure may be determined by the starting port buffer value set in the processing of 179SGS103 or 179SGS106. If the time saving flag is set and the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure (179SGS132; Y and 179SGS133; Y), the variable display of the pending memory is also variable within the 50th time of the high base state It is determined whether or not to display (179SGS134). In addition, whether or not the variable display is within the 50th time of the high base state is the value of the time saving state variable display number counter described later and the reservation memory is the number of the reservation memory in the second special figure reservation storage unit It should be judged by whether.

For example, if the pending storage is the first pending storage in the second special figure pending storage unit, whether the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less If the pending memory is the second pending memory in the second special figure pending storage unit, the value obtained by adding 2 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less Determining whether or not, if the pending memory is the third pending memory in the second special figure pending storage unit, the value obtained by adding 3 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less It is determined whether or not there is, and if the pending storage is the fourth pending storage in the second special figure pending storage unit, the value obtained by adding 4 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" It suffices to determine whether or not:

When the variable display of the pending memory is within the 50th variable display in the high base state (179SGS134; Y), the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table for determining the big hit variation pattern. (179SG135).

Also, if the time saving flag is not set (179SGS132; N), etc. If the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure (179SGS133; N), the variable display of the pending memory is the 51st time in the high base state In the case of subsequent variable display (179SGS134; N), a big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining a big hit variation pattern (179SGS136).

In addition, when it is determined that the 179SGS124 is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (179SGS124; Y), the transmission of the symbol designation command according to the small hit type Along with executing the setting (179SGS129a), as a table for judging a small hit variation pattern, a small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (179SGS129b).

After executing any of the processes of 179SGS127, 179SGS128, 179SGS129b, 179SGS135, and 179SGS136, a random number MR3 is included using the set fluctuation pattern determination table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. 179SGS137 determines the variation category according to the range of the determined values. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 179SGS137 to the effect control board 12 (179SGS138), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the CPU 103 first sets a time saving state variable display count counter indicating the number of special game (variable display) times after being controlled to the high base state (time saving state). (179SGS141). It should be noted that the fact that the time saving state variable display number counter is set means that any numerical value including 0 is set in the time saving state variable display number counter. When the time saving state variable display number counter is set (179SGS141; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to 179SGS143 (179SGS142). In addition, when the time saving state variable display frequency counter is not set (179SGS141; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS143 without executing the process of 179SGS142.

In 179SGS143, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is set. Then, if the jackpot flag is set (179SGS143; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144; Y), it further determines whether the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is any one of 1 to 50, that is, the variable display to be executed is controlled to a high base state. It is determined whether or not it is the 1st to 50th variable display (179SGS145). If the value of the time-saving state variable display frequency counter is any one of 1 to 50 (179SGS145; Y), select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table B as the table used for determining the big hit variation pattern. (179SGS146), go to 179SGS155.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (179SGS144) or when the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 51 or more (179SGS145; N), the jackpot variation is used as a table used for determining the jackpot variation pattern. The pattern determination table A is selected and set (179SGS147), and the process proceeds to 179SGS155.

When the jackpot flag is not set at 179SGS143 (179SGS143; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, thereby determining whether or not time saving control is being performed (179SGS148). Then, if the time saving flag is set (179SGS148; Y), as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure and proceed to 179SGS155 (179 SGS149).

On the other hand, if the time saving flag is not set (179SGS148; N), the total reserved storage number is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified total reserved storage number is 2 or more (179SGS150).

When the specified total reserved storage number is 1 or less (179SGS150; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss as a table used for determining one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. , 179SGS155 (179SGS151).

Also, if the identified total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (179SGS150; Y), it is further determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is 5 or more (159SGS152).

If the total number of reserved memories is not 5 or more (179SGS152; N), select and set the deviation pattern determination table B as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, and set it to 179SGS155. Proceed (179SGS153).

In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is 5 or more (179SGS152; Y), as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation pattern determination table C for failure is selected and set. , 179SGS155 (179SGS154).

Then, in 179SGS155, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table for the big hit or the variation pattern determination table for the loss based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation, for example. By referring to, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types.

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of 179SGS155. That is, the process of 179SGS155 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in 179SGS155, according to the variable display special figure designation buffer value, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Setting for starting variable display of special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (179SGS156). As an example, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 179SGS156, settings are made for transmitting various commands for starting variable display of special symbols (179SGS157). For example, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, etc., the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable display start command table prepared in advance is stored in the transmission command buffer. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in . On the other hand, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable In order to sequentially transmit the display result designation command and the second pending storage count notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer designated by the transmission command pointer. Store in the area.

After executing the process of 179SGS157, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (179SGS158). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (179SGS159), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in 179SGS157, every time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. , the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern determination table B for the big win is always selected. is determined as the super reach γ variation pattern, and if the variable display result is a big hit B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, the variation pattern is always selected by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table A. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big win variation pattern determination table B. However, if the variable display result is a jackpot A in the variable display after the 1st to 50th times in the high base state, by selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is always changed to the super reach γ variation pattern. decide.

FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S112 to terminate the variable display of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (179SGS181). In addition, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the variable display of the first special figure in the first special design display device 4A is terminated, and the variable display special figure designation is performed. When the buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (179SGS182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (179SGS183), and when the big hit flag is not set (179SGS183; N), the process moves to 179SGS191.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (179SGS183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the variable probability flag and the short time flag if the variable probability flag and the short time flag are set (179SGS184). Moreover, if the time saving state variable display number counter is set, the time saving state variable display number counter is also cleared (179SGS185). Then, the performance control board 12 is set to transmit a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the stored jackpot type (179SGS186).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (179SGS187).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot in the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (179SGS188). Also, the number of opening times (for example, 7 times for big win A, 16 times for big win B) is set in the big winning opening opening times counter (179SGS189). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S114) (179SGS190).

On the other hand, in S191, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (179SGS191; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGS194.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (179SGS191; N), that is, if it is in a high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (179SGS192) . Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (179SGS193), and if it is not "0" (179SGS193; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS195, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" ' (179SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared to end the time saving control (179SGSS194), and the process proceeds to 179SGS195.

In 179SGS195, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". If the value of the probability variable number counter is "0" (179SGS195; N), proceed to 179SGS199.

Then, in 179SG199, the CPU 103 is a game state corresponding to the set state of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag (when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set, only the high probability high base state and the probability variable flag are set In this case, the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state, and the low probability low base state when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are not set) is performed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (179SGS200).

FIG. 8-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (179SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (179SGS201; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS202). When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot A (170SGS202:;N), the jackpot end display timer is set to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the ending effect, which will be described later, is performed as the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. A value corresponding to the corresponding first display time is set (179SGSS203), and the process ends. In addition, when the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (170SGS202:;Y), the jackpot end display timer is set to the time (jackpot end display time ) is set (179SGSS204), and the process ends. Note that the second display time is longer than the first display time described above. In other words, the characterizing section 179SG is set so that after the big win B is finished, the ending effect, which will be described later, can be executed for a longer period of time than after the big win A is finished. Note that the first display period in this characteristic portion 179SG is, for example, 20 seconds, and the second display period is, for example, 45 seconds.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (179SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (179SGS205). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (179SGS206). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (179SGS206; Y), the CPU 103 sets both the time saving flag and the probability variation flag (179SGS207, 179SGS208), and the number of special game times controlled to the probability variation number counter in the probability variation state. (variable display count) is set to "150" (179SGS209). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot B (179SGS210). When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot A (179SGS210; N), the number of times of the special game (variable display number) controlled to the time-saving state is set to 179SGS213 in the time-saving number counter. Proceed (179SGS211), if the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS210; Y), the time-saving number counter is controlled to the time-saving state (variable display number) "150" which is the number of special games. Set and go to 179SGS213 (179SGS212).

In 179SGS213, the CPU 103 sets "0" to the time-saving state variable display execution count counter. Then, the jackpot flag is cleared (179SGS214), and transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (179SGS215). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and the time saving flag (179SGS216), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to , and the jackpot ending process is terminated (179SGS217).

FIG. 8-20 is part of a flow chart of the effect control process processing (S76) in the characterizing portion 179SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. After executing the pending display update process (179SGS162) for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) S170 to S177 shown in FIG. It is designed to execute one of the processes.

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. (179SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (179SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (179SGS242 has the pending display flag set "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (179SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 179SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 179SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 179SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (179SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (179SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 179SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 179SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (179SGS246).

In the 179SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-22(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 179SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed.

In the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 179SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (179SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 179SG193 and the big hit type specified in 179SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-22(A) and 8-22(B), in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 179SGS246 or 179SGS249 (179SGS250). When execution of pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 179SGS246 or 179SGS249 is set to the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (179SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 179SGS251).

8-23 and 8-24 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (179SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (179SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 179SGS271 (179SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (179SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (179 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 179SGS272 or 179SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (179SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (179SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of aligned decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is a low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) (179SGS276a). When the gaming state is the low base state (179SGS276a; Y), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (179SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 179SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (179SGS278). That is, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGS277 to 179SG278, the rear variable display during suggestion production (jackpot suggestion production and setting suggestion production) is a variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the low base state in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A character performance suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 that the result will be a big hit, or a timer performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big win and suggesting a period until execution of the suggested performance during the rear variable display is started. A jackpot suggestive effect or a setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 which is executable and suggests that the variable display result will be a big win as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance which is the latter half of the variable display. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a value. In other words, the process of 179SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) is determined in the process of 179SGS278 (179SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 179SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 179SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (179SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, execution of the front variable display suggestive effect is not determined unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined. In variable display of reach and normal reach, no timer effect or character effect is executed as suggestive effect during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (179SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 179SG285 (179SGS282), and if execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 179SGS285 (179SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 179SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (179SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (179SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing section 179SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (179SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (179SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (179SGS290).

In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high base state (high probability high base state) in the processing of 179SGS276a (179SGS276a; N), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern. (179SGS291). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern other than the super reach γ (179SGS291; N), the high base medium for determining whether or not to execute the high base medium variable display suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the high base medium variable display suggestive effect. After executing the variable display suggestion effect determination process (179SGS292), the processes of 179SGS285 to 179SGS290 are executed, and the variable display start setting process ends.

Also, if the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (179SGS291; Y), a special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS293) for determining the effect pattern of all-rotation reach effect as a special reach effect to be executed after reach is executed. Along with executing, after selecting the process table corresponding to the special reach effect pattern determined in the special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS294), the processes of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290 are executed to end the variable display start setting process. .

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (179SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. (179SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SG301 (179SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, the suggested effect during the rear variable display While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, it is more important to play the game whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 179SGS302 (179SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 179SGS302 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process of determining the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is terminated. , 179SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (179SGS304).

In the processing of 179SGS302, when the execution of the big hit suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (179SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 8-26(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 179SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. It is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the processing of 179SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 179SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (179SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (179SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 179SG307. Of these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (eg 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set to low, setting values 3 and 4 to intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 to high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 179SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to the pattern SS- at a rate of 60% as shown in FIG. 8-28. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (179SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (179SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the set suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined (179SGS312).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, at a rate of 5%, execution of a timer effect is determined as a suggestive effect during front variable display.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-29, after executing 179SGS313 or 179SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (179SGS315). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (179SGS316).

When execution of a character presentation is determined as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (179 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 179SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Of these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of winning a big hit. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the process of 179SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and 80% of the time, pattern CS-2 is determined. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable display of parts is terminated (179SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 179SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-30(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 8-31(C), 8-40(D) and 8-40(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 179SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect during variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the effect process during variable display (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive effect during the rear variable display becomes 0, the process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the determined suggestive effect during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in this characteristic part 179SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

FIG. 8-33 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 179SGS291 of FIG. In the high base middle variable display suggestive effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (179SGS321), and determines whether or not to execute the high base medium variable display suggestive effect and the damage base medium variable display suggestive effect. The effect pattern of the effect is determined (179SGS322).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), when the variable display result is out and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out), the high base at a rate of 100% Determines non-execution of medium variable display suggestive effect, decides to execute high base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern KS-1 at a rate of 0%, high base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern at a rate of 0% Execution in KS-2 is determined, and execution in pattern KS-3 of the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is lost), 50% of the time, it is decided not to execute the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect, and 40% of the time. Determine execution with pattern KS-1 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect, determine execution with pattern KS-2 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect at a rate of 10%, high base at a rate of 0% Execution is determined in pattern KS-3 of middle variable display suggestion effect.

In addition, if the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach is lost), it is determined at a rate of 30% not to execute the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect, and 30%. At a rate of 30%, the pattern KS-1 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is decided, and at a rate of 30%, the pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is decided, and at a rate of 0%. Execution in the pattern KS-3 of the high base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined.
In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, 10% of the decision is made not to execute the high base medium variable display suggestive effect, and 20% of the high base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern KS-1 is determined. Execution is decided, 60% of the time it is decided to execute pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect, and 10% of the time it is decided to execute pattern KS-3 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect. decide.

In addition, when the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the pattern KS-1 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 0%. is determined to be executed, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute pattern KS-2 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect, and at a rate of 0% it is executed with pattern KS-3 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect. to decide.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-34(B), the pattern KS-1, which is the effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect, is applied when the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is not executed in the image display device 5. KS-2 is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "chance") indicating that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big win is higher (higher expectations for a big win) is displayed in blue. Pattern KS-2 is an image display. This is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "hot") is displayed in red, indicating that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win is higher (higher expectation for a big win) in the device 5 than in the pattern KS-1. Pattern KS-3 is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "big win confirmed") is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5 to notify that the result of the variable display is a big win.

In other words, as the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect in the present characteristic portion 179SG, the degree of expectation of the big hit differs depending on the content of the message displayed on the image display device 5 (the degree of expectation of the big hit for each message: "big hit confirmed">" “Hot” > “Chance”), and the color of these messages also changes the expectation of a big hit. In particular, displaying these messages in rainbow colors means that the variable display result always results in a big win (expectation for big win for each color of message: rainbow > red > blue).

Returning to FIG. 8-33, after executing the process of 179SGS322, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the high-base middle variable display suggestion effect has been determined (179SGS323). When it is decided to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect (179SGS323; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored and the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect decision processing is terminated (179SGS324), and the high-base medium variable display suggestive When it is decided not to execute the effect (179SGS323; N), the processing of 179SGS324 is not executed, and the high-base middle variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated.

When execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display (S172), stores process data according to the decided effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect. After setting, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent variable display process (S172).

FIG. 8-35 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 179SGS293 of FIG. 8-24 as special reach effect pattern determination processing. In the special ready-to-win effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies whether or not the special ready-to-win effect is being executed from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS331), and performs the special ready-to-win effect from the first hit to the variable display. is executed (179SGS332). When there is no execution of the special ready-to-win effect from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; N), the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect is determined from the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ and stored (179SGS333), and the special ready-to-win effect is performed. End the pattern determination process. On the other hand, if there is execution of a special ready-to-win effect from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; Y), the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect is determined from among the previously executed effect patterns and stored ( 179SGS334), the special reach effect pattern determination process is terminated. Incidentally, in the process of 179SGS331, it is possible to specify whether or not the special ready-to-win effect is to be executed from the first hit to the variable display depending on whether or not there is an effect pattern stored in these 179SGS333 and 179SGS334.

In addition, in the processing of 179SGS333, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), the execution of the special reach production effect pattern α is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and the execution of the special reach production effect pattern β is determined. is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and execution of the special ready-to-win effect with the effect pattern γ is determined at a rate of 33.4%.

In the process of 179SGS334, the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and when the previous special reach effect is executed with the effect pattern α, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B) Then, execution of the special ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern α is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the special ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern β is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution with the performance pattern γ of the special ready-to-reach performance is determined. is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and the previous special reach effect is executed in the effect pattern β, as shown in FIG. The performance pattern α of the reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, the performance pattern β of the special reach performance is determined at a rate of 0%, and the performance pattern γ of the special reach performance is performed at 50%. determined by the ratio of Then, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and the previous special reach effect is executed in the effect pattern γ, as shown in FIG. The performance pattern α of the reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, the performance pattern β of the special reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance pattern γ of the special reach performance is determined at 0%. determined by the ratio of

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-36(E), the effect pattern α of the special ready-to-reach effect is a full-rotation ready-to-reach effect in which the character X is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect pattern β of the special ready-to-reach effect is is a full-rotation ready-to-reach effect in which the character Y is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and a special ready-to-reach effect effect pattern γ is a full-rotation ready-to-reach effect in which the character Z is mainly displayed on the image display device 5. .

After the effect control CPU 120 executes the special reach effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the effect pattern of the special reach effect in the process of 179SGS294 (see FIG. 8-24), Furthermore, by executing the processing of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290, a special ready-to-reach effect is executed in the variable display in the high base state.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β in the high base state and the variable display result is the jackpot A, In the variable display after the 51st time in the high base state, the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α and the super reach β, and the variable display result is the jackpot B, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display. During the period of 20 seconds between the start of the reach and reaching reach, it is possible to execute a high-base medium variable display suggestion effect, and during the execution period of the reach effect (23 seconds or 33 seconds after reaching reach) , the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-46) on the image display device 5 from the second timing during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect to the timing until the end of the variable display. After that, a big-hit determination notification effect is executed to stop and display the decorative pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the variable display is executed with the super reach γ variation pattern, and the variable display result is a big hit B. , the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (Fig. 8 -45) is displayed, and the player is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit B. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special ready-to-win effect (full-rotation ready-to-win effect) on the image display device 5 over the execution period of the ready-to-win effect (160 seconds after becoming ready-to-win), and ends the special ready-to-win effect. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the vicinity of the timing. That is, the jackpot determination notification effect in FIG. 8-37 (B) is the movable body 179SG300 executed during 20 seconds before reach and the rainbow effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-45) on the image display device 5. It consists of a display and a stop display of the decoration pattern during the ready-to-win production.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot A in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, as shown in FIG. While it is reported that the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period and the variable display result becomes a big hit, the variable display result is a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state. In the case of , as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the reach state, and the result of the variable display is a big hit. (Big hit B) is announced.

Also, focusing on the case where the variable display result is a big hit B in the high base state, as shown in FIG. While it is notified that the variable display will be a big hit from the first timing (the timing within 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach), the second timing (the timing during the execution of the reach effect later than the first timing) ) does not notify that the variable display will be a big hit. Then, when the number of times of variable display is 51 or more, while there is no notification that the variable display will be a big hit from the first timing, the variable display is a big hit from the second timing at a rate of 100%. It is to be notified that it will be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, it is always notified that the variable display will be a big hit at the first timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable at the second timing A case may be provided in which it is notified that the display is a big hit.

FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect processing. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is in operation (179SGS341). When the ending effect process timer is not in operation (179SGS341; N), the ending effect process timer corresponding to the jackpot type is set (179SGS342). In addition, in the processing of 179SGS342 of this characteristic part 179SG, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 20 seconds according to the first display period is set, and the jackpot type is set. is a big hit B, the ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 45 seconds according to the second display period may be set.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the ending effect process timer (179SGS343), controls the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the content of the process data 1, and controls the ending effect. Processing ends (179SGS344).

Also, when the ending effect process timer is in operation in the process of 179SGS341 (179SGS341; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the ending effect process timer by -1 (179SGS345), and the value is decreased by -1. It is determined whether or not the effect process timer has timed out, that is, whether or not the value of the ending effect process timer has become 0 (179SGS346). When the ending effect process timer times out (179SGS346; Y), the ending effect process data is switched (179SGS347), and the next ending effect process timer is started (179SGS348). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (179SGS349), and the ending effect processing is terminated.

If the ending effect timer has not timed out (179SGS346; N), the effect device is controlled according to the absence of process data corresponding to the ending effect process timer (179SGS350), and the ending effect processing is terminated.

When the ending effect process timer times out in the processing of 179SGS346, the effect control CPU 120 may end the ending effect if the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer.

By executing the ending effect processing by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, as shown in FIG. A state entry effect is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state. In addition, the high probability high base state is controlled to the low probability high base state by executing the variable display 100 times, and is controlled to the low probability low base state by executing the variable display 50 times. be.

In other words, the first high base state entry effect in the characteristic portion 179SG is controlled to the high base state over 100 times of variable display, and controlled to the high accuracy state over 150 times of variable display. It is also a production that informs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (A), in the first high-base state entry effect, "100 times" is displayed as the variable display count (number of time reductions) controlled to the high base state on the image display device 5. It has become so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39(B), when the jackpot game of jackpot B ends, the first ending effect and the second ending effect are executed. More specifically, first, after the first high base state entry effect is displayed for 20 seconds on the image display device 5, the second high base state rush effect is displayed for 25 seconds on the image display device 5. be done. In particular, in the second high base state rush effect, the movable body 179SG300 operates for five seconds after the second high base state rush effect is started. After that, the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state. In addition, the high probability high base state is controlled to the low probability low base state by executing the variable display 150 times.

In other words, the second high base state entry effect in the characteristic portion 179SG is controlled to the high base state over 150 times of variable display, and controlled to the high accuracy state over 150 times of variable display. The ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39(B) includes a second high base state rush effect in addition to the above-described first high base state rush effect.

In addition, in the ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), during the execution of the first high base state rush effect, the image display device 5 is once controlled to the high base state. 100 times” is displayed. Then, the display of "100 times" is updated and displayed to "150 times" in a predetermined period during execution of the second high-base state entry effect (time reduction number display update period shown in FIG. 8-39(B)). .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-39(B), in the first high base state entry effect, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state, is executed instantaneously. The update from the display of "100 times" to the display of "150 times" in the second high base state entry effect is executed over a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds).

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the low base state in the characteristic portion 179SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-40 to 8-42. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and the pending memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect based on the starting prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-40(C) to 8-40(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the mode of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the front part A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period until the suggesting effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(F) to 8-41(H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "Chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-41 (J) 8 is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the effect pattern that has been determined is the pattern AS-3. As indicated by -41(K), the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!".

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the present characteristic portion 179SG is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the presentation mode at the end of the jackpot game and in the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-43 to 8-46.

First, as shown in FIGS. 8-43(A) and 8-43(B), when the jackpot game of jackpot A ends, the first high-base state entry effect is executed as the ending effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays "100 times" as the number of times of variable display (time reduction number of times) controlled to the high base state. After the end of the first high-base state entry effect, the game state is controlled to the high-probability high-base state.

Next, during execution of the jackpot game B, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (A) and 8-44 (B), a predetermined round of the jackpot game (8 rounds in FIG. ) indicates that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of 16 rounds and that the high base state is controlled over 150 variable displays after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 8-44(C), as part of the ending effect, the first high base state entry effect is first executed, and the image display device 5 is controlled to the high base state. "100 times" is displayed as the number of variable display times (number of time saving times). Next, when the first high base state entry effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. A movement (action) to an effect position and a movement (action) from the effect position to the standby position are executed. When the movable body 179SG300 returns to the standby position, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is updated to the display of "150 times".

Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable display is started as shown in FIGS. Then, the movement (movement) of the movable body 179SG300 from the standby position to the performance position is executed. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K so as to partially overlap the movable body 179SG300 positioned at the effect position. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K, so that the game interest can be improved.

Then, when the movable body 179SG300 is moved (moved) from the effect position to the standby position, the image display device 5, as a special ready-to-win effect, performs the all-rotation ready-to-win effect in any of the effect pattern α to effect pattern γ. executed. During execution of the all-rotation ready-to-win effect, the image display device 5 displays an effect image 179SG005M different from the effect image 179SG005K in rainbow color together with the image of the all-rotation ready-to-win effect. Therefore, the player recognizes that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by recognizing the display of the effect image 179SG005M in addition to the movement of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to FIG. As shown in -46(C), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in the low base state. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-46(D), the movable body 179SG300 is moved from the waiting position to the effect position during the ready-to-win effect, and the rainbow effect image 179SG005K is displayed on the image display device 5. is executed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit.

After the movement of the movable body 179SG300 from the performance position to the standby position is executed, the rainbow colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during variable front display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -30 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 8-40 (D) and 8-40 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(H) and 8-42(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display are performed. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (B) and 8-31 (C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-32, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, so that the setting suggestion effect by the player is executed. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the second half of the variable display of super reach, was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21 and FIG. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the blue or red camera, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion effect.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 and 8-42, when the pending display advance notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending storage display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding display notice is used as a pre-reading notice. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as the pre-reading advance notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to a white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. , but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display with a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect, or the pending memory display may be displayed with a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is made ready to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the speaker 8L, 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display notice effect. It can be executed, and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case of display in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, a case is provided in which the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-32, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since the variable display is suggested, the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-22, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected. Always determine the variation pattern to be the variation pattern of super reach γ, and if the variable display result is a big hit B in the variable display after the 51st time in the high base state, be sure to select the big hit variation pattern determination table A Since the variation pattern is determined to be any one of normal reach, super reach α and super reach β, the big win game state of the big win B is prevented from occurring continuously in a short period of time, and the second during the variable display. Since the fact that the variable display result is a big hit B is announced early at one timing, it is possible to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to the lengthening of the variable display period.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit is performed from the first timing before reaching the reach and after reaching the reach (during the production of the reach). ) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Both of the two timings may be set as the timing before reaching the reach or the timing after reaching the reach, and the movable body 179SG300 may be operated from each timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, a form is exemplified in which it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot A or a jackpot B by operating the movable body 179SG300 during the variable display in the high base state. The invention is not limited to this, and when the movable body 179SG300 operates during the variable display in the high base state, it may be limited only to the case where the variable display result is a big win B. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the movable body 179SG300 operates during variable display in the high base state, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the variation pattern of super reach γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is changed to the super reach γ variation pattern. It may be possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach at a rate lower than the determined rate. Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result after the 51st variable display in the high base state is a big hit B, the variation pattern is set at a rate that is lower than the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach. A case may be provided in which the variation pattern of the super reach γ is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the variable display of the 1st to 50th times, which is the "first period" after the end of the jackpot game, and the variable display after the 51st time, which is the "second period" (51st to 100th or 51st times) ~ Variable display up to 150 times), and the form controlled to the high-precision high base state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high-precision high base state in the present invention is controlled In addition to these "first period" and "second period", the "third period" may be included as the period to be set. Regarding these "first period", "second period", and "third period", if the "second period" is a period after the "first period", the "third period" is " It may be a period before the "first period", a period between the "first period" and the "second period", or a period after the "second period".

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the special ready-to-win effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. Since the all-rotation ready-to-win effect as the ready-to-win effect can be executed, the excitement of the jackpot confirmation notification effect in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the all-rotation reach effect is performed as part of the big hit confirmation notification effect during the variable display. Although an executable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, an effect different from the all-rotation ready-to-win effect may be executed.

Furthermore, when the all-rotation reach effect is executed during the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 before the all-rotation reach effect. Since 179SG005M is displayed, it becomes easy to understand that the game is controlled to the big win game state of big win B after the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, a form in which the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 during the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is an effect that makes it easy to understand that it is controlled to the jackpot game state of the big win B after the variable display, the effect to be executed before the all-rotation ready-to-win effect can be Effects other than the movement of the body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M may be used.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the special ready-to-win effect in any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ, and can set the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect. At the time of determination, since the performance pattern is determined from among the performance patterns executed last time is excluded, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the repeated execution of the special ready-to-win performance with the same performance pattern. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, a mode is exemplified in which the production pattern of the special reach production can be determined from three production patterns from production pattern α to production pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect may be determined from two or less effect patterns, or may be determined from four or more effect patterns.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 179SG, regarding the effect pattern of the special ready-to-reach effect once determined to be executed, the special ready-to-win effect is again determined by executing the special ready-to-win effect in another effect pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the special ready-to-win effect once determined to be executed, until a predetermined period elapses (until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or until a predetermined time elapses) (until it is done) may be made undecidable again as an effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, for the special ready-to-win performance once determined to be executed, a special It is also possible to make it undecidable again as the effect pattern of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the production pattern of the special ready-to-win production is determined, the special ready-to-win production continues in a specific production pattern by determining the production pattern lottery from among the previous production patterns excluded. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ready-to-win effect may be prevented from being continuously executed in a specific effect pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a first high base state rush effect and a second high base state rush effect as the ending effect after the jackpot game. In particular, after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, the image display device 5 displays "100 times" which is the variable number of times of display controlled to the high base state by executing the first high base state entry effect, and then the second display is performed. 2. By operating the movable body 179SG300 as an effect of entering the high base state and switching the display of "100 times", which is the number of times of variable display controlled in the high base state, to the display of "150 times", a jackpot game state is entered. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from being excessively increased by shortening the control interval.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, after the big win A big win game, only the first high base state entry performance is executed, and after the big win B big win game, the second high base state rush performance is further executed after the first high base state rush performance. Although a mode of executing a rush effect is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, the effect is partially different from the first high base state rush effect. After executing , the second high base state entry effect may be executed.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-39(B) and 8-44(F), after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state entry effect, the high base state is controlled. Although the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times, is updated to the display of "150 times" over a predetermined period of time, the present invention is not limited to this, The display of "100 times", which is the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state, is performed directly after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state entering effect, without the update display of the previous predetermined period. may be updated to the display of

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (D) to 8-44 (F), as the second high base state entry effect, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to "150 times". ”, it is possible to emphasize to the player that it is controlled to the high-precision high-base state over a maximum of 150 times of variable display, so the second high-base state rush effect It is possible to reduce the decrease in game interest caused by the performance period being longer than the first high base state rush performance.

In addition, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to the display of "150 times" as the movable body 179SG300 moves. Since it is possible to further emphasize to the player that it is controlled to the high base state over the variable display, the second high base state rushing effect is longer than the first high base state rushing effect. It is possible to further reduce the decrease in the interest in the game caused by the long time.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to the display of "150 times". is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of "100 times", which is the variable display count controlled to the high base state, is performed by replacing the operation of the movable body 179SG300 with the speaker 8L, The display of "150 times" may be updated together with the sound output from 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square, a star, or a blue 8-48 (A) and FIG. 8-48 (A) and As shown in FIG. 8-48(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 179SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 179SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 179SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 179SG005E blocking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B), as a modification 179SG-3, setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 179SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as the start timing of the rear variable display suggestive effect during the variable display of the super reach, and the later Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 179SG-. As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be performed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestive effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the pending memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big win, a setting suggesting effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Further, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if the effect is executable from the timing before the target variable display is started.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as an indication effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, after displaying "100 times" which is the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state on the image display device 5 as the first high base state entry effect, the second high base state is displayed. As the base normal rush effect, the display of "100 times" is updated to "150 times" as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the high base state entry effect, after displaying the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state on the image display device 5 as an initial display of "0 times", the display of "0 times" is changed to "100 times". Up to display may be updated and displayed. In this case, as the second high-base state entry effect, the update speed for updating the display of "100 times" to "150 times" is updated from the display of "0 times" to "100 times". By making it slower than the update speed, it is possible to further emphasize that the high-precision high-base state is controlled over a maximum of 150 variable displays, so that the second high-base state rush effect is changed to the first high-base state. It is possible to further reduce the decrease in game interest caused by the performance period being longer than the state entry performance.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as a performance for notifying the confirmation of the big hit that can be executed during the variable display, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the background color effect image 179SG005K on the image display device 5 and the big win are shown. Although the form in which the stationary display of decorative patterns in combination can be executed has been exemplified, as the jackpot confirmation notification performance that can be executed during the variable display, combinations of performances other than these may be used. The fixed notification effect may simply be a stop display of decorative symbols in a combination indicating a big hit.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 and 8-39, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, only the first high base state entry effect is performed based on the process data of 1. , and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is finished, the first high-base state rush effect and the second high-base state rush effect are executed based on one process data. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished, the first high base state rushing effect and the second high base state rushing effect may be executed based on different process data. By doing so, the first high base state entry effect can be executed based on the common process data after the jackpot game A and after the jackpot game B is finished, so the data capacity of the ROM 121 can be saved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention performs a variable display to provide a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. Controllable to a plurality of advantageous states including (for example, jackpot B jackpot game state), disadvantageous set values (for example, 1 to 3) and advantageous set values that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous set values. (for example, 4 to 6), a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can set one of a plurality of set values including A first period until the display is executed (for example, a period until the variable display is executed 50 times), and a second period after the variable display is executed the predetermined number of times (for example, the 51st to 100th times) Or the period in which the 51st to 150th variable display is performed), and the frequency of variable display is performed in a special state higher than the normal state (for example, a game that can be controlled to a high-precision base state) State control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) and the first variable display period (for example, fluctuations in super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6 when executing variable display 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the pattern) and the second variable display period, which is a longer period than the first variable display period (for example, the special figure of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8-6 Variable display period determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 8-17) for determining one variable display period from among a plurality of different variable display periods. part), and a notification effect for notifying that the control is at least in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that moves the movable body 179SG300 with ) is the first timing during variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), during 20 seconds from the start of variable display to reach timing) and a second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), 23 seconds or 33 (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display) that can be executed at a plurality of different timings, including the timing within a second), When the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the first period, the variable display is executed at the first timing at a higher rate than when executed during the second period. The variable display that can execute the notification effect and is executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period than during the first period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a high rate (for example, as shown in FIG. In this case, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing. 179SG300 operates), the variable display period determination means executes the variable display in the second period when the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. The second variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when the second variable display period is set, and the variable display performed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is performed in the second period. 8-10 and 8-17, the first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when running in the first period. When the variable display result is the big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display, the variation pattern is always determined to be the variation pattern of super reach γ by selecting the variation pattern determination table B for the big win, and 51 in the high base state. When the variable display result is a big hit B in the variable display after the first time, the variable pattern is always determined to be any one of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table A. Part to do), further, determination means that can be determined to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part that CPU103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5), and based on the determination result of the determination means, the Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) suggesting control to be in an advantageous state in a mode including or not including a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). (For example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18 and then the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) A special effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the cut-in effect determination shown in FIG. 9-18) 7), and the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A or jackpot B) and the first a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; When it is not determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), the pachinko game machine 1 If the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in pattern CI-3), and the advantageous set value is set. and when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIGS. 9-21(C) to 9- As shown in 21(E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3. executable portion), and when the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, the cut-in When the effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, the variable display result always becomes a big hit and the portion is controlled to the jackpot game state of the big win C), the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed, and the advantageous effect is executed. 9-21 and 9-22, the cut-in effect is controlled to the pattern CI-3. In the case of execution, when the variable display result becomes a big win, the game machine is controlled to one of the big win game states of big win A, big win B, and big win C.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from occurring consecutively in a short period of time, and to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to an increase in the variable display period. Further, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and since there is a case where the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and the second advantageous state is controlled, the advantageous set value is set. A suggestive performance including a specific performance is executed to reduce the decrease in game interest when the game is not controlled to an advantageous state.

In particular, when an advantageous set value with a high degree of advantage for the player is set among a plurality of set values, an advantageous state continuously occurs in a short period of time than when the unfavorable set value is set. However, according to such a configuration, even when the advantageous set value is set, the advantageous state can be maintained while preventing an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to the lengthening of the variable display period. It is possible to prevent, as much as possible, excessive occurrence in succession in a short period of time.

Note that setting values may be suggested using a plurality of elements. In this way, when setting values that are advantageous to the player are suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Even if no set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, if the set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested by another element, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player. , can improve the game interest.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to an increase in the variable display period while preventing the advantageous state from occurring consecutively in a short period of time. As an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of reducing the decrease in interest in the game when a suggestive effect including a specific effect is executed and the game is not controlled to an advantageous state, the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. any one of a plurality of setting values including disadvantageous setting values (for example, 1 to 3) and advantageous setting values (for example, 4 to 6) that are more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous setting values. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting such set values, and determining means (for example, CPU 103 executing special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state part), and based on the determination result of the determining means, a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-reach effect) suggesting that the control is performed to the advantageous state, a specific effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-3) Suggestive effect execution means that can be executed in a mode including and not including (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-18, and then executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and a special effect (for example, cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) that is a different effect from the specific effect and suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4). , a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination processing shown in FIGS. 9 to 18), and the advantageous state is the first advantageous state ( For example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A or jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state of jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, and the suggestive effect executing means When the disadvantage setting value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. 9 -21 (B), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is a failure, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3. ), and when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect including the specific effect can be executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (C) to 9-21 (E), the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out, the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3), and when the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, As shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, the variable display result always becomes a big win and is controlled to the big win game state of the big win C), When the suggestive effect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-21 and 9- As shown in 22, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result is a big win, the portion is controlled to one of the big win A, big win B, and big win C. ) gaming machines. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of Characteristic Portion 208SG)

Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 208SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-39.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 208SG003, a glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left-game area 208SG002L by operating the ball-hitting handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 208SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 208SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a board case 208SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 208SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 208SG003 are provided. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting-switching switch 208SG052, is accommodated in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 208SG051 and the setting-switching switch 208SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the substrate case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting switch 208SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 208SG003 is closed. Operation is enabled by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 208SG201. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON when the power is turned on, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as a set value change state. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

By turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any number from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the number displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. be. When the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 sends a set value designation command to the effect control board 12, regardless of whether a new set value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 208SG025A, second reservation display 208SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 208SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 208SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state in which game balls are launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 208SG133 that lights when in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 208SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results can be derived and displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

Each of the first suspension display 208SG025A and the second suspension display 208SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 208SG025A and second pending display 208SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, every time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment). In the part 208SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 208SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 208SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 208SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321, and the second movable body 208SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. An origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 208SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probable variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the characteristic portion 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 9-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 9-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a variation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, five or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β , super reach γ, and super reach δ. In addition, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment Super reach variation pattern special figure fluctuation time in which super reach effect such as super reach is executed Super reach δ, super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α in order of special figure fluctuation pattern is set long.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as the variation pattern of the super reach γ, after once notifying that the variable display result is a win as the reach performance of the super reach γ, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. There is provided a variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 9-6) for executing a resurrection effect. For this reason, the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect is set to have a special figure variation time longer than the variation pattern of normal super reach γ and a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern of super reach δ. However, it is exceptionally the highest (100%) variation pattern for the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. Table, jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), jackpot variation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a losing variation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal diagram variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

9-7 to 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Figure 9-7 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-7 (E) shows that the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-8 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 4 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-9 (A) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 1, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1237 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 2, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a first special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1253 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 2 and the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1383 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

Figure 9-9 (E) shows that the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 3, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1272 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the setting value is 3 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1429 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 4, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1292 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (B) shows that the variable special figure is the second special figure, and the second special figure selected when the setting value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1487 are among the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1317 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the setting value is 5 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1556 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

In Figure 9-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the setting value is 6, and the game state is normal state (low probability low base state) or time saving state (low probability high base state) It is a second special figure display result determination table that is selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1346 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

FIG. 9-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and the setting value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability variable state (high probability high base state) 10 is a display result determination table for In the first special figure display result determination table, 1020 to 1674 out of the hit determination values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state, "big hit" special figure assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big hit" when the normal state or the time saving state is controlled to the big hit game state (this embodiment is 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is higher (this In the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/160, and when the setting value is 4, it is 1 /140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state, the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-11 (A) and 9-11 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the resurrection effect are executed. No super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), super reach γ jackpot variation pattern with resurrection effect executed (PB1-5), super reach δ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 51 to 200 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). 401 to 650 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) in which no resurrection effect is performed, and 651 to 700 are assigned to super reach γ jackpot variation patterns in which resurrection effect is performed. (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation pattern for the big hit is determined using one variation pattern determination table, that is, the pachinko Although a form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the setting value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , the determination ratio of each variation pattern may be made different for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β deviation (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5). A predetermined random value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), super reach δ deviation variation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 is super reach α. is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach γ deviation ( PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super Variation pattern of loss of reach α (PA2-2), variation pattern of loss of super reach β (PA2-3), variation pattern of loss of super reach γ (PA2-4), variation pattern of loss of super reach δ (PS2-5) , a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 is assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2 -4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation (PA2-4), variation pattern judgment of super reach δ deviation (PA2-5) A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for is possible is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). , and 971 to 997 are assigned to the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 850 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 851 to 930 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Variation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to super reach γ deviation variation patterns, and 971 to 997 are assigned to super reach δ deviation variation patterns, that is, if the variable display result is deviation, super reach Since the variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from deteriorating due to the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern for loss is a variation pattern for loss of super reach α, a variation pattern for loss of super reach β, a variation pattern for loss of super reach γ, and a variation pattern for loss of super reach δ. Although each determination ratio exemplifies a form that is completely the same between each set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination rate of the pattern, the variation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ, and the variation pattern of deviation of super reach δ may be different for each set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The general pattern holding storage unit stores the holding information of the general pattern game which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 208SG020 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Also, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting portion, data constituting a reception command buffer at the time of start winning is stored. In the start winning command buffer, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" to "1-4" area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. In addition, in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, a start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), or a pending memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer correspond to these commands, and the first special figure reservation storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the drawing reserved storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted upward one by one as shown in FIG.

Effect control CPU120, at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening, stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, commands are stored from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage or the second special figure pending storage. I will go.

Next, processing executed by the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 208SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the starting winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 9-15, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be able to specify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. When the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (208SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (208SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 208SGS505, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (208SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (208SGS506).

In addition, when the second start opening switch is not ON (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reservation memory number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start prize determination process is terminated.

After executing either of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (208SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (208SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), after clearing the start buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS516), the start prize determination process is performed. exit. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 208SGS 512 of FIG. 9-15 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic part 208SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 in FIG. 5), the display corresponding to the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the set value Result determination table (see FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10) is selected, and the selected display result determination table is used to set the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) as "jackpot" and the jackpot game state It is determined whether or not to control to a small hit game state as a judgment of whether or not to control to a special figure display result as a "small hit".

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 208SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 208SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state at machine 1 (208SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is on, and is in a short time state (low probability high base state) when the probability variable flag is off and the time saving flag is on. , and specify that it is in a normal state (low probability low base state) when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 208SGS521, the CPU 103 identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, a display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 1 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 9-7 (A) Set the display result determination table, set the setting value is 1 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), and the setting value is 2 And if the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (C) is set, and the set value is 2 and the game state is a probability variable state If there is, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. ) to set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. to set.

Also, when the starting port buffer value is "1", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 4 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the setting value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (D), the set value is 6 and the game state is normal state or time saving state shown in FIG. 9-8 (E) Set the first special figure display result determination table, and set the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) Set the table, set the setting value is 1 and when the gaming state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), the setting value is 2 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (D), and if the setting value is 3 and the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 9-9 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-9 (F) when the set value is 3 and the game state is a variable probability state .

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "2", if the set value is 4 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 9-10 (A) Set the table, if the set value is 4 and the game state is a variable probability state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), set the set value is 5 and If the game state is a normal state or a time saving state, set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (D) is set, and if the set value is 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 9-10 (E) Set the second special figure display result determination table, and set the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-10 (F) when the set value is 6 and the game state is a variable probability state .

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs processing to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In addition, in the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table are compared with the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a big hit, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result is determined as a small hit. However, if the value of the random number MR1 is out of the numerical range of the big hit determination value and out of the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined as lost.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is determined at 208SGS525 that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined not to be a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, when it is determined that it will be lost in the variable display (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

If the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for deviation shown in FIG. (208SGS528; Y), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 9-14(D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined at 208SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (208SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), go to 208SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 208SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (208SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". Execute (208SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-13 (B) (208SGS532), and proceed to 208SGS536.

In addition, in this feature part 208SG, in these variation pattern determination table A to variation pattern determination table D for loss, a determination value of 1 to 700 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern in common. 701 to 997 are assigned super reach fluctuation patterns.

Therefore, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Even if the number of pending memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used. is determined.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, and 208SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (208SGS536). In this characteristic part 208SG, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the "non-reach" variable display mode is common. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit). and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

Incidentally, the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-17 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the receive command buffer at the time of start winning, for one buffer number (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered as the stop pattern is displayed. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, if the received display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, for example, a decoration pattern in which 3 patterns are arranged in an odd number other than "7" or "3" as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Then, if the received display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which the three patterns are "7" or "3" as the stop pattern (jackpot design). Also, if the received display result designation command is a result designation command for the fifth variable table that indicates a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" or "246", or three consecutive even numbers (or (odd numbers) and other decorative patterns (small winning patterns) are determined. When the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating a loss, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) different from the above-described big win patterns and small win patterns is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop pattern of the decoration pattern may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of Super Reach can be specified from the variation pattern designation command read in 208SG275. If the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; Y), cut for determining whether or not to execute a cut-in effect to be described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. In effect determination processing (208SGS278) is executed and the process proceeds to 208SGS279. Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, at 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect (208SGS279). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-29, the notice effect is a effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. It is an effect that can be executed in the period from the time to the timing of reach.

After executing 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from among a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time (variable display time) specified by the variable pattern designation command (208SGS283). Also, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208SGS285).

9-18 to 9-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern (208SGS302).

When the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether the variation pattern is PB1-5, that is, whether it is the variation pattern of super reach γ for executing the resurrection effect (208SGS303). . When the variation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304), and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). .

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. proceed to In addition, in 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot A or jackpot B. is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Note that the cut-in effect in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-31, displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of super reach γ. and prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or when the operation reception period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to patterns.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w with a blue effect, and the effect pattern is If it is pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x with a red effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005z with a rainbow effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS307), Go to 208SGS308. In addition, in 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), based on the fact that the variation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10%. determined by the ratio of In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), and terminates the cut-in effect determination process.

Also, in 208SGS303, if the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko game machine 1. (208SGS311), and determines whether or not the specified setting value is one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be specified based on the setting value designation command received from the CPU 103 .

In addition, when execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the cut-in effect start waiting timer times out, a cut-in effect process table corresponding to the determined effect pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table each time the variable display effect process is executed. 9, etc.) to execute the cut-in effect.

If the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), a cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. 208SGS3316 determines the presence/absence of and effect pattern (208SGS3316), and executes the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. In the 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 9-21(B), the cut-in Non-execution of production is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C. The presence or absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in the 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (jackpot type) is the jackpot C. Runs are determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is wrong in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is wrong. The presence or absence of performance execution and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in 208SGS318, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is reduced to 55% based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result being a failure. Decide on a percentage. Also, as a cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS312 is any one of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4. (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS325), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 9-21(C), the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS324; N), based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. As shown in FIG. 9-21(C), the 208SGS326 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the fact that the set value is 4 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high probability high base state (208SGS327). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS327; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, that the variable display result is lost, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4 and the variable display result is off and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS329), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (C), the setting value is 4, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5. (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS334), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in the 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 9-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS333; N), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 9-21(D), based on the fact that the set value is 5 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost in 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS336; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS338), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (D), the setting value is 5, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the variable It is determined whether or not the displayed result is a big hit (208SGS339). Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), whether or not to execute cut-in effects and the pattern of effects based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B is determined (208SGS342), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In the 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 9-21(E), the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, so the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%. decide. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS341; N), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of the execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined ( 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 9-21(E), based on the fact that the set value is 6 and the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a loss in 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is a high probability high base state (208SGS344). Incidentally, the game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103 .

If the game state is the high-probability-high base state (208SGS344; Y), cut based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is a failure, and that the game state is the high-probability-high base state. Whether or not to execute an in effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, that the variable display result is wrong, and that the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Non-execution of the in effect is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, as the cut-in effect execution, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Also, if the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6 and the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base Based on the state or the low-probability-low base state, the presence or absence of cut-in effect execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS346), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (E), the setting value is 6, the variable display result is out, and the game state is a low probability high base state or a low probability low base state Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

In addition, in the case of super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). . Incidentally, whether or not the variable display result is a big hit can be determined by determining whether or not the variation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the pattern of performance are determined based on the fact that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. 208SGS310 is executed. As shown in FIG. 9-22, 208SGS354 determines non-execution of the cut-in effect at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. FIG. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C (208SGS353; N), based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the presence or absence of cut-in performance and the performance pattern are determined (208SGS355), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is performed. to run. Incidentally, in 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 9-22, based on the fact that the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a failure in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), whether or not to execute a cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the fact that the variable display result is a failure (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310. process. Incidentally, in 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 9-22, based on the result of the variable display being a failure, it is decided at a rate of 35% not to execute the cut-in effect. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in production, the production pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , to pattern CI-4 at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the performance is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big win (the degree of expectation of the big win) is the lowest, and when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, it is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Big hit expectation in cut-in effect: non-execution<pattern CI-1<pattern CI-2<pattern CI-3<pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-4, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined that the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-21, 9-22 and 9-24, the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 when performing variable display with the variation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ. The execution ratio is set to be the lowest (0%) when the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern is super reach γ deviation/super reach δ deviation. Then, when the variation pattern is super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection performance, the set value is any one of 1 to 3 and the variation pattern does not execute resurrection performance - par reach γ jackpot/super reach δ jackpot, set value is 4 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 5 and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection performance, the set value is 6 and the variation pattern. is a super ready-to-win γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to increase.

Also, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3, When the cut-in performance is executed in pattern CI-3, while it is determined that the variable display result will be a big win (any of the big wins A to C), the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. is 4 to 6, even if the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result may be wrong. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3. The expectation of a big hit is set low when the effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect of super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to any one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, if we pay attention to the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 more than the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) that executes the resurrection effect. and pattern CI-4 are set low. Therefore, in the case where the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the cut-in effect is executed in CI-3 and the failure is notified, so that the pachinko game machine In spite of the player recognizing that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the resurrection performance is executed later and the big win is notified, thereby pachinko. It is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, which is uncertain.

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect. If you pay attention to it, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same for any setting value, but when the variable display result is a loss. , the higher the setting value, the higher the ratio of execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 (the ratio of execution of pattern CI-3 at the time of failure when setting values 4 to 6: setting value 4 < setting value 5<setting value 6).

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is different. Since the frequency becomes higher, the player can expect that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. there is

Also, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) in which the resurrection effect is not executed. , if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display results are different, if the game state is the high-probability-high base state, the game state is the low-probability-high-base state or the low-probability state. The pattern CI-3 is set to perform the cut-in effect at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high-probability-high base state, and the variable display result is lost, so that the game state is low-probability. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to one of the set values 4 to 6, so that the player can be urged to continue the game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. ing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-21(B) to 9-21(E), focusing on the case where the variable display result is lost, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the cut-in. The performance execution ratio is set high. In other words, in the present characteristic portion 208SG, it is suggested that any of the set values 4 to 6 is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is lost. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed in a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the cut-in performance is executed. It is possible to improve a game interest.

9-21 and 9-22 are merely an example, and the determination ratio of the cut-in effect pattern is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. You may make it differ from the characteristic part 208SG suitably. However, if the determination ratio of the effect pattern of these cut-in effects is appropriately changed, the tendency of the degree of expectation of the jackpot of each effect pattern (the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the cut-in effect: non-execution < pattern CI-1 < pattern CI-2 <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself is maintained so that a player does not misunderstand the degree of expectation for a big win according to the production pattern of the cut-in production when the cut-in production is executed. is desirable.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this example, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the setting value set in the variable display and the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the super In the case of performing variable display with the variation pattern of reach γ or super reach δ, cut-in effect may be performed without fail during the variable display. In this way, when the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, The percentage assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect when the variable display result is a loss (see FIGS. 9-21 (C) to 9-21 (E)) is set to the pattern CI-1 or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to differ from the characteristic portion 208SG. By doing so, it is possible to improve interest by executing cut-in effects during the variable display of super reach γ and super reach δ, while preventing excessive cut-in effects from being executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6.

FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 9-17. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big win or a loss (208SGS362; N), execution of cut-in effect is further determined. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not any cut-in effect pattern is stored (208SGS363).

If execution of cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored effect pattern of cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364 ). If the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big win (208SGS366; Y), the big win type is specified (208SGS367), and the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big win type (208SGS368).

Also, if the variable display result is a failure (208SGS366; N), whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the process of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 15%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Incidentally, as described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is lost is set to the pachinko game machine 1. This is the case where the set value is any one of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4) fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 9-26(C) and 9-30, pattern YE-1 is a production pattern for displaying an image 208SG005s of character A on the image display device 5 with a blue effect. , and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005t of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 with a red effect, and pattern YE-3 is a production pattern in which the image 208SG005u of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying a group image 208SG005v of characters A to C on the image display device 5 with a rainbow effect.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 40%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach lost), the non-execution of the notice effect is reduced by 50%. Decide on a percentage. In addition, as execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. again,
Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach loss), non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach lost), non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the pattern YE-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, Pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is patterned. When executed with YE-1, when the advance notice effect is executed with pattern YE-2, when the advance notice effect is executed with YE-3, and when the advance notice effect is executed with YE-4. It is set so that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is high (Expectation of the big hit of the advance notice effect: non-execution of notice effect <execution in pattern YE-1<execution in pattern YE-2<execution in pattern YE-3<pattern YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), when it is determined that the cut-in effect is not to be executed, or the cut-in effect is a pattern CI- in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-4. 1 or pattern CI-2 is determined, there is provided a case where the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is jackpot C. For this reason, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, it is also determined whether or not the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to attract people's attention.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation for a big hit than pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, or a variable display result is a big hit as an effect pattern of cut-in effect. In the case where the pattern CI-4 that determines that the jackpot type is the jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 will be used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the variation pattern. It is set to never run. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only with pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2, so that the cut-in effect is started when the variable display result is a big hit. This prevents the player from recognizing it at a timing (starting timing of the advance notice effect) before the timing. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a loss, both the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect are not executed in the effect pattern with a high expectation of the big win, so the player is excessively concerned about the variable display result becoming a big win. It is prevented to expect

After executing any of the processes 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern decided by one of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to give the notice. The effect determination process is ended (208SGS372). When it is decided not to execute the notice effect (208SGS370; N), the notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

It should be noted that, when execution of the notice effect is determined in the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect by -1 each time the effect process during variable display (S172) is executed. When the performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for advance notice performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern is set. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the process table for the notice effect each time the variable display effect process is executed. etc.) can be used to execute the forewarning effect.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern of loss, the notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during variable display, and in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display. 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β, the notice effect is performed in the period before reach during variable display from pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3 is executable. It should be noted that, in the fluctuation pattern of the loss of the normal reach, the loss of the super reach α, and the loss of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-28, in the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach δ, it is possible to execute the notice effects in patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. , cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-3 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-29(A) and 9-29(B), in the variation patterns of the super reach γ jackpot in which the resurrection effect is not executed, the notice effect is performed in patterns YE-1 to YE-1 in the period before the reach. Pattern YE-4 can be executed, and cut-in effects can be executed in patterns CI-1 to CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when execution of the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 is determined, the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when executing the variable display in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-30 to 9-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-30(A) to 9-30(E), when execution of the announcement effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the image display device 5 performs the announcement effect in the pattern YE-. 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 with a blue effect, and when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2 , the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and when the announcement effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5 with a gold effect. , when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays a collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit according to which of the character images 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is and the color of the effect displayed together with the character image. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the notice effect is executed only in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It is possible.

Then, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach γ, as shown in FIGS. A ready-to-reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight in this characteristic portion 208SG) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-31(D), when it comes to the cut-in effect execution start timing during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ, the display of the image of the push button 31B is started on the image display device 5, and the player , prompting to operate the push button 31B is performed. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B. When the acceptance period has passed, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 along with a cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1,
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with a blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with a red effect on the image display device 5, and a cut-in effect is performed. When the in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed with a golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the preview effect is executed in pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 A cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player can determine which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z the cut-in images displayed on the image display device 5 are, and the colors of the effects displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A) and 9-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern), super reach γ As a result of ready-to-win performance (battle performance result), the ally character loses to the enemy character, and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, and the variable display ends. Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A) and 9-32 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect) , the super reach γ's ready-to-win effect result (battle effect result) is announced that the variable display result is a big win when the ally character wins the enemy character, and the variable display ends.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (A), 9-32 (D) to 9-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot for executing resurrection effect variation pattern), it is once notified that the variable display result is lost when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of super reach γ. Then, by executing the resurrection effect, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit by the ally character winning against the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, Variable display ends.

Although not shown in the figure, when the variable display is the variable display of super reach δ, after the decoration pattern is displayed in combination with the reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same way as the reach performance of super reach γ. battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. Incidentally, the battle production as the reach production of super reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of super reach γ, but the fighting characters and the development of the battle may be partially different. may

As described above, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI While it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing at -3, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of line when executed in pattern CI-3. In other words, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is lost, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. , when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not, and the amusement of the game can be improved. there is

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, as a variation pattern capable of executing a cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, once it is notified that the variable display result is lost, Super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern (super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern to execute revival presentation, PB1-5) and super ready-to-win not to perform revival presentation to inform that the variable display result is a big win by executing revival presentation γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4) are provided, and when variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the revival performance, the super reach γ jackpot variation that does not execute the revival performance. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. For this reason, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is not displayed, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by the player. is recognized as any one of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to 4 to 6 by executing the resurrection performance and announcing that the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that it is any of the above.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, disadvantageous set values are set to 1 to 3, and advantageous set values are set to 4 to 6, which are set in the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on whether the set value is a disadvantageous set value or an advantageous set value, the decision ratio of the cut-in effect or the notice effect pattern is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the unfavorable setting value is 1 and the advantageous setting value is 6, the values may be set in any range that does not overlap each other. Specifically, only 1 to 5 disadvantageous setting values and 6 advantageous setting values may be used, or only 1 disadvantageous setting value and 2 to 6 advantageous setting values may be used.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the suggestive effect in the present invention is described as a ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effect other than the ready-to-win effect, such as pseudo-continuous effect in which temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols are repeatedly executed, may be used as long as the effect can be executed immediately.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 (C) to 9-21 (E), when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the deviation of the super reach γ When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game is performed. When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. For this reason, the higher the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, and the result of the variable display becomes wrong. Since the player can expect the setting, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern. shows a form in which the higher the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, the pachinko game Regardless of the setting value set in machine 1, the rate at which the cut-in effect is performed in pattern CI-3 may be the same rate. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of super reach γ loss, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify a person.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and FIG. 9-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big win, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the 1 big win variation pattern determination table regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the ratio of executing the resurrection performance during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the execution ratio of the resurrection performance during the variable display follows the set value for determining the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit, the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection performance is executed during the variable display. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute any reach effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect are exemplified in a form that is previously determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute any ready-to-win effect and whether or not to execute the resurrection effect can be changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be determined as appropriate from the display result or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-22, as the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result always becomes a big hit, so the variations of the super reach effect increase and the super Since the cut-in performance is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the ready-to-win performance of the reach δ, and the variable display result can make the player pay attention to whether or not the result is a big hit, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, an example is provided in which variation patterns (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of super reach δ are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect of super reach δ may not be provided.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the ready-to-win state (or until the end timing of the variable display) and a ready-to-reach state. A cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect is provided. Furthermore, the advance notice effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect patterns (pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-4) with different degrees of expectation for big hits. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, when the variable display result is a big win and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4, which are effect patterns with a high expectation of a big win. When executing the notice effect, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot. By executing YE-3 or YE-4, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the cut-in effect pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the notice effect pattern YE-1 or YE-2. It is possible to keep the player's attention until the end of the variable display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

9-27 and 9-28, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the notice effect is set at a timing before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). When the variable display result becomes a big win, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big win from the timing before the execution of the cut-in effect. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest by preventing this.

In addition, in the characterizing part 208SG of the present embodiment, during the variable display of 1, the form in which the announcement effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a pre-reading effect during the variable display executed before the variable display for executing the cut-in effect. Furthermore, the notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect, so that the variable display result is obtained during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the ready-to-win effect. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-21 and 9-22, when the variable display result is a big win, the big win type is always the big win C when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. In the case of losing, the player can be made to think that even if the player wins a big win, it may have been a big win A or B, so the game interest in the variable display result losing. can reduce the decrease in

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is When there is a possibility of losing), when the cut-in performance is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, when the advance notice performance is executed, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Since the production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4, by executing the advance notice production in pattern YE-3 and YE-4 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not result in a big hit, the pattern CI-3 and the pattern YE-3 or YE-4 are executed during the same variable display, so that the variable display result becomes a big win. It is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations of

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, one of 4 to 6 is set as the set value for the pachinko game machine 1, and the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3, which is a effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. As a mode for restricting the execution of pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 of the notice effect when the execution of is made unexecutable in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4), but the present invention is not limited to this. is set, and when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in pattern CI-3, which is a pattern with high expectations for a big hit, the advance notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that of pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2. Pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4 may be executable. In other words, "when the advantageous set value is set and the determining means has not decided to control to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in a mode including the specific effect. If executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted." A mode in which patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed at a lower rate than in YE-2 is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-21, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variation pattern is the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. In the case, if the set value is the same value, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state is the cut-in effect in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state. It is set higher than the rate of execution in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is a high-probability-high base state, cut-in production is performed in the variable display of super reach γ out more than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state. Since the pattern CI-3 is executed more frequently, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 in the high-probability-high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high-probability-high base state. can improve the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 because the player can easily continue the game even after the game state shifts to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 208SG of the present embodiment, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is performed with the variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ deviation. When it is executed, if the game state is a high-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut-in at a higher rate than when the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state Although a form in which the effect can be executed in pattern CI-3 is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. , and when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high-probability-high base state. If the game state is the low-probability-low base state or the low-probability-high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic unit 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern for not executing the resurrection effect is displayed. Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed in (PA2-4 or PB1-4) has been exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 9-33 (A) to 9-33 (E) as a modification 208SG-1, when executing variable display with a variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing a resurrection effect , the cut-in effect may be disabled in pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is lost, any one of 4 to 6 is set to the pachinko game machine 1 as the set value. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement in a game due to the execution of a resurrection performance and the notification that a variable display result is a big win despite the player recognizing that it has been set.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed with the super ready-to-win γ jackpot variation pattern that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the super ready-to-win γ big win variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in pattern CI-3 is set lower than in the case of executing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and modification 208SG-2 is shown in FIG. As shown in -34 (A) to Fig. 9-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival production, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival production is displayed. The ratio of performing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of performing the variable display in the variation pattern. By doing so, for example, the player puts more importance on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not than whether the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. In the case where it is, after the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the result of the variable display is notified of the loss, the resurrection effect is further executed and the result of the variable display is the big hit. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not it is reported, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5 ), the cut-in effect can be executed in pattern CI-3. As shown in 9-35 (A) to FIG. 9-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, a super reach γ jackpot for executing a resurrection effect. When the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1 to 3 In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variable display result is the jackpot, and is set in the pachinko game machine 1. After it is determined that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and it is once notified that the variable display result is lost during the reach performance of super reach γ during the variable display, the resurrection performance is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result will be announced as a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

That is, in the characteristic part 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the variable display result is lost. By confirming that the value is one of 4 to 6, it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and further, the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. It is possible to promote the continuation of the game against.

Further, in the characteristic part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is a deviation variation pattern When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be a pattern CI-1 or CI-2, which is a pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is performed. exemplifies a form in which the advance notice effect can be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is determined. It is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. and when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PA2-4) in which super reach γ is lost, it is decided to execute the pattern CI-3, which is a production pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, as a cut-in production. In the case where the cut-in effect is a pattern with a low degree of expectation for a big hit, the forewarning effect is performed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 is determined to be executed. It may be executable. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2 By executing the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than , it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be wrong. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game will be a big hit, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characterizing part 208SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. And when the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), if the game state is the high probability high base state, if the set value is the same value, the game state is low Although the form in which the cut-in effect can be executed with the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the probability low base state or the low probability high base state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a modification As shown in FIG. 9-37 as 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is variably displayed with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4). is executed, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same, cut at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state The in effect may be made executable in pattern CI-3.

By doing so, if the gaming state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state During the reach production of super reach γ Since the cut-in effect is likely to be executed in the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, variable display of 1000 times) in the low-probability-low base state. When the willingness to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6. is notified to the player, the player's desire to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-probability-low base state and the low-probability-high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 208SG-5, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed with the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4). When the game state is a low-probability-low base state or a low-probability-high base state, if the set value is the same value, a cut-in effect will be performed at a higher rate than when the game state is a high-probability-high base state. Although the pattern CI-3 exemplifies a form that can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 208SG-6, as shown in FIG. When the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the super reach γ deviation variation pattern (PA2-4), the gaming state is a low probability low base state or a low probability high base state , the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the game state is the high probability high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, so the high probability Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state in which the variable display result is less likely to result in a big hit than the high base state, the game interest in these low fixed base state and the low fixed high base state can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of super reach γ and super reach δ was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 (A) and 9-40 (B) as a modification 208SG-7, during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of cut-in production, pachinko game A set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be made executable. In addition, in the case where the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period (for example, , the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the ready state), the above-mentioned notice effect can be executed, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect may differ according to the effect pattern of the notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, the set value is set at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in pattern YE-1 or pattern YE-2. It suffices if the suggestive effect can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which production pattern the announcement effect is executed, and when the announcement effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4, Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting value suggesting performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance, the player can be prevented from overlooking the set value suggesting performance.

1 Pachinko machine
4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and is controllable to a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The variable display is performed in a period including at least a first period from the end of the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times and a second period after the variable display is performed the predetermined number of times. a game state control means capable of controlling a special state with a higher frequency than the normal state;
When executing variable display, one variable display period is determined from among a plurality of different variable display periods including a first variable display period and a second variable display period longer than the first variable display period. variable display period determining means for
Execution of notification effect capable of executing notification effect for notifying control to at least the second advantageous state at a plurality of different timings including a first timing during variable display and a second timing after the first timing. means and
with
The notification effect executing means is configured so that the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is higher when executed during the first period than during the second period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the first timing at a rate, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a higher rate than when it is executed in one period,
The variable display period determining means determines that when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the first period, the display is executed during the second period. When the second variable display period can be determined at a high rate and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, the first determining the first variable display period at a higher rate than when running in period;
The notification effect executing means can execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period when the variable display in the second variable display period is executed in the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images